1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 22 #include <net/codel.h> 23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 24 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 25 26 /** 27 * DOC: Introduction 28 * 29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 32 * drivers. 33 */ 34 35 /** 36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 37 * 38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 43 * tasklet function. 44 * 45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 47 */ 48 49 /** 50 * DOC: Warning 51 * 52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 54 */ 55 56 /** 57 * DOC: Frame format 58 * 59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 62 * hardware. 63 * 64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 65 * 66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 68 * 69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 71 */ 72 73 /** 74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 75 * 76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 80 * 81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during 82 * suspend. 83 * 84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 85 * 86 */ 87 88 /** 89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 90 * 91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed 92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness 93 * between different stations/interfaces. 94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead 95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx(). 96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx(). 97 * 98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue 99 * driver operation. 100 * 101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 104 * 105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 107 * 108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a 109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a 110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op. 111 * 112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 116 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 117 * 118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 122 * .release_buffered_frames(). 123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 126 */ 127 128 struct device; 129 130 /** 131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 132 * 133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 135 */ 136 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 139 }; 140 141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 142 143 /** 144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 149 */ 150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 155 }; 156 157 /** 158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 159 * 160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 162 * 163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 172 */ 173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 174 u16 txop; 175 u16 cw_min; 176 u16 cw_max; 177 u8 aifs; 178 bool acm; 179 bool uapsd; 180 bool mu_edca; 181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 182 }; 183 184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 189 }; 190 191 /** 192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 199 */ 200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 206 }; 207 208 /** 209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 210 * 211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 213 * 214 * @def: the channel definition 215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 224 */ 225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 228 229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 230 231 bool radar_enabled; 232 233 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 234 }; 235 236 /** 237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 240 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 248 * for changes/removal.) 249 */ 250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 253 }; 254 255 /** 256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 257 * 258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 261 * done. 262 * 263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 266 */ 267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 271 }; 272 273 /** 274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 275 * 276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback 277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed. 278 * 279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 280 * also implies a change in the AID. 281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 288 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 290 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 292 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 297 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 304 * changed 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 306 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 308 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 309 * context had been assigned. 310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 313 * keep alive) changed. 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 316 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 320 * 321 */ 322 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 323 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 324 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 325 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 326 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 327 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 328 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 329 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 330 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 331 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 332 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 333 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 334 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 335 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 336 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 337 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 338 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 339 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 340 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 341 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 342 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 343 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 344 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 345 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 346 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 347 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 348 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 349 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 350 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 351 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 352 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 353 354 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 355 }; 356 357 /* 358 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 359 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 360 * filtering will be disabled. 361 */ 362 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 363 364 /** 365 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 366 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 367 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 368 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 369 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 370 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 371 * once each time the timeout triggers. 372 */ 373 enum ieee80211_event_type { 374 RSSI_EVENT, 375 MLME_EVENT, 376 BAR_RX_EVENT, 377 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 378 }; 379 380 /** 381 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 382 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 383 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 384 */ 385 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 386 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 387 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 388 }; 389 390 /** 391 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 392 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 393 */ 394 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 395 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 396 }; 397 398 /** 399 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 400 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 401 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 402 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 403 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 404 */ 405 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 406 AUTH_EVENT, 407 ASSOC_EVENT, 408 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 409 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 410 }; 411 412 /** 413 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 414 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 415 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 416 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 417 */ 418 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 419 MLME_SUCCESS, 420 MLME_DENIED, 421 MLME_TIMEOUT, 422 }; 423 424 /** 425 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 426 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 427 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 428 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 429 */ 430 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 431 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 432 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 433 u16 reason; 434 }; 435 436 /** 437 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 438 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 439 * @tid: the tid 440 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 441 */ 442 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 443 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 444 u16 tid; 445 u16 ssn; 446 }; 447 448 /** 449 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 450 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 451 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 452 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 453 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 454 * @u:union holding the fields above 455 */ 456 struct ieee80211_event { 457 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 458 union { 459 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 460 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 461 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 462 } u; 463 }; 464 465 /** 466 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 467 * 468 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 469 * 470 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 471 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 472 */ 473 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 474 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 475 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 476 }; 477 478 /** 479 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 480 * 481 * @lci: LCI subelement content 482 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 483 * @lci_len: LCI data length 484 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 485 */ 486 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 487 const u8 *lci; 488 const u8 *civicloc; 489 size_t lci_len; 490 size_t civicloc_len; 491 }; 492 493 /** 494 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 495 * 496 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 497 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 498 * 499 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 500 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK 501 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 502 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 503 * ACK, BACK or both 504 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 505 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 506 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 507 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 508 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 509 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 510 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 511 * @assoc: association status 512 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS 513 * or not 514 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 515 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 516 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 517 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 518 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 519 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 520 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 521 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 522 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 523 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 524 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 525 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 526 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 527 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 528 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 529 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 530 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 531 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 532 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 533 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 534 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 535 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 536 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 537 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 538 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 539 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 540 * the current band. 541 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 542 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 543 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 544 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 545 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 546 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 547 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 548 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 549 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 550 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 551 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 552 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 553 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 554 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 555 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 556 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 557 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 558 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 559 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 560 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 561 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 562 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 563 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 564 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 565 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 566 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 567 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 568 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 569 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 570 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 571 * your driver/device needs to do. 572 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 573 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 574 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 575 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 576 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 577 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 578 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 579 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 580 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 581 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 582 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 583 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 584 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 585 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 586 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 587 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 588 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 589 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 590 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 591 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 592 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 593 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 594 * station. 595 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 596 * responder functionality. 597 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 598 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 599 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 600 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 601 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 602 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 603 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 604 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 605 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 606 * @he_operation: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to 607 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 608 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 609 */ 610 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 611 const u8 *bssid; 612 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 613 bool multi_sta_back_32bit; 614 bool uora_exists; 615 bool ack_enabled; 616 u8 uora_ocw_range; 617 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 618 bool he_support; 619 bool twt_requester; 620 bool twt_responder; 621 /* association related data */ 622 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 623 bool ibss_creator; 624 u16 aid; 625 /* erp related data */ 626 bool use_cts_prot; 627 bool use_short_preamble; 628 bool use_short_slot; 629 bool enable_beacon; 630 u8 dtim_period; 631 u16 beacon_int; 632 u16 assoc_capability; 633 u64 sync_tsf; 634 u32 sync_device_ts; 635 u8 sync_dtim_count; 636 u32 basic_rates; 637 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 638 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 639 u16 ht_operation_mode; 640 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 641 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 642 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 643 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 644 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 645 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 646 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 647 int arp_addr_cnt; 648 bool qos; 649 bool idle; 650 bool ps; 651 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 652 size_t ssid_len; 653 bool hidden_ssid; 654 int txpower; 655 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 656 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 657 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 658 u16 max_idle_period; 659 bool protected_keep_alive; 660 bool ftm_responder; 661 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 662 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 663 bool nontransmitted; 664 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 665 u8 bssid_index; 666 u8 bssid_indicator; 667 bool ema_ap; 668 u8 profile_periodicity; 669 struct ieee80211_he_operation he_operation; 670 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 671 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 672 }; 673 674 /** 675 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 676 * 677 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 678 * 679 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 680 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 681 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 682 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 683 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 684 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 685 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 686 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 687 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 688 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 689 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 690 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 691 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 692 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 693 * station 694 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 695 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 696 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 697 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 698 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 699 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 700 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 701 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 702 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 703 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 704 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 705 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 706 * hardware queue. 707 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 708 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 709 * is for the whole aggregation. 710 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 711 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 712 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 713 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 714 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 715 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 716 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 717 * off-channel operation. 718 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 719 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 720 * it can be sent out. 721 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 722 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 723 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 724 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 725 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 726 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 727 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 728 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 729 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 730 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 731 * queue gets full. 732 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 733 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 734 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 735 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 736 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 737 * should kick the MLME state machine. 738 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 739 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 740 * status to user space) 741 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 742 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 743 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 744 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 745 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 746 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 747 * handled properly by the device. 748 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 749 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 750 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 751 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 752 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 753 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 754 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 755 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 756 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 757 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 758 * PS-Poll responses. 759 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 760 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 761 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 762 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 763 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 764 * monitor injection). 765 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 766 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 767 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 768 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 769 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 770 * 771 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 772 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 773 */ 774 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 775 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 776 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 777 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 778 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 779 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 780 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 781 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 782 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 783 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 784 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 785 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 786 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 787 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 788 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 789 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14), 790 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 791 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 792 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 793 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 794 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 795 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 796 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 797 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 798 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 799 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 800 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 801 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 802 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 803 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 804 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 805 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 806 }; 807 808 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 809 810 /** 811 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 812 * 813 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 814 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 815 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 816 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 817 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 818 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 819 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 820 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 821 * 822 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 823 */ 824 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 825 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 826 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 827 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 828 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 829 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 830 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 831 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(6), 832 }; 833 834 /* 835 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 836 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 837 */ 838 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 839 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 840 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 841 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 842 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 843 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 844 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 845 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 846 847 /** 848 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 849 * Rate Control algorithm. 850 * 851 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 852 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 853 * 854 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 855 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 856 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 857 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 858 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 859 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 860 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 861 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 862 * Greenfield mode. 863 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 864 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 865 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 866 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 867 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 868 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 869 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 870 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 871 */ 872 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 873 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 874 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 875 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 876 877 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 878 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 879 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 880 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 881 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 882 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 883 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 884 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 885 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 886 }; 887 888 889 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 890 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 891 892 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 893 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 894 895 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 896 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 897 898 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 899 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 900 901 /** 902 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 903 * 904 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 905 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 906 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 907 * 908 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 909 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 910 * 911 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 912 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 913 * 914 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 915 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 916 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 917 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 918 * information:: 919 * 920 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 921 * 922 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 923 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 924 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 925 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 926 * information should then contain:: 927 * 928 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 929 * 930 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 931 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 932 */ 933 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 934 s8 idx; 935 u16 count:5, 936 flags:11; 937 } __packed; 938 939 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 940 941 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 942 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 943 { 944 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 945 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 946 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 947 } 948 949 static inline u8 950 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 951 { 952 return rate->idx & 0xF; 953 } 954 955 static inline u8 956 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 957 { 958 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 959 } 960 961 /** 962 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 963 * 964 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 965 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 966 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 967 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 968 * 969 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 970 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races) 971 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 972 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally 973 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 974 * @control: union part for control data 975 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 976 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 977 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 978 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 979 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 980 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 981 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 982 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 983 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 984 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 985 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 986 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 987 * @pad: padding 988 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 989 * @status: union part for status data 990 * @status.rates: attempted rates 991 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 992 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 993 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 994 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 995 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission 996 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid 997 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 998 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 999 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1000 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1001 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1002 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1003 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1004 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1005 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1006 */ 1007 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1008 /* common information */ 1009 u32 flags; 1010 u32 band:3, 1011 ack_frame_id:13, 1012 hw_queue:4, 1013 tx_time_est:10; 1014 /* 2 free bits */ 1015 1016 union { 1017 struct { 1018 union { 1019 /* rate control */ 1020 struct { 1021 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1022 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1023 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1024 u8 use_rts:1; 1025 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1026 u8 short_preamble:1; 1027 u8 skip_table:1; 1028 /* 2 bytes free */ 1029 }; 1030 /* only needed before rate control */ 1031 unsigned long jiffies; 1032 }; 1033 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1034 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1035 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1036 u32 flags; 1037 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1038 } control; 1039 struct { 1040 u64 cookie; 1041 } ack; 1042 struct { 1043 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1044 s32 ack_signal; 1045 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1046 u8 ampdu_len; 1047 u8 antenna; 1048 u16 tx_time; 1049 bool is_valid_ack_signal; 1050 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)]; 1051 } status; 1052 struct { 1053 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1054 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1055 u8 pad[4]; 1056 1057 void *rate_driver_data[ 1058 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1059 }; 1060 void *driver_data[ 1061 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1062 }; 1063 }; 1064 1065 static inline u16 1066 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1067 { 1068 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1069 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1070 */ 1071 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1072 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1073 } 1074 1075 static inline u16 1076 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1077 { 1078 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1079 } 1080 1081 /** 1082 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1083 * 1084 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1085 * @info: Basic tx status information 1086 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1087 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet 1088 */ 1089 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1090 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1091 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1092 struct sk_buff *skb; 1093 struct rate_info *rate; 1094 }; 1095 1096 /** 1097 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1098 * 1099 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1100 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1101 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1102 * 1103 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1104 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1105 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1106 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1107 */ 1108 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1109 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1110 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1111 const u8 *common_ies; 1112 size_t common_ie_len; 1113 }; 1114 1115 1116 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1117 { 1118 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1119 } 1120 1121 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1122 { 1123 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1124 } 1125 1126 /** 1127 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1128 * 1129 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1130 * 1131 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1132 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1133 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1134 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1135 * 1136 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use 1137 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data 1138 * instead if you need only the less space that allows. 1139 */ 1140 static inline void 1141 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1142 { 1143 int i; 1144 1145 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1146 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1147 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1148 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1149 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1150 /* clear the rate counts */ 1151 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1152 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1153 1154 BUILD_BUG_ON( 1155 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20); 1156 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0, 1157 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) - 1158 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len)); 1159 } 1160 1161 1162 /** 1163 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1164 * 1165 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1166 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1167 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1168 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1169 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1170 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1171 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1172 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1173 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1174 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1175 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1176 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1177 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1178 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1179 * de-duplication by itself. 1180 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1181 * the frame. 1182 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1183 * the frame. 1184 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1185 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1186 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1187 * merging. 1188 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1189 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1190 * (including FCS) was received. 1191 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1192 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1193 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1194 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1195 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1196 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1197 * each A-MPDU 1198 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1199 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1200 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1201 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1202 * on this subframe 1203 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1204 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1205 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1206 * done by the hardware 1207 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1208 * processing it in any regular way. 1209 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1210 * them for sniffing purposes. 1211 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1212 * monitor interfaces. 1213 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1214 * them for sniffing purposes. 1215 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1216 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1217 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1218 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1219 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1220 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1221 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1222 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1223 * interleaved with other frames. 1224 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific 1225 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by 1226 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap. 1227 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1228 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1229 * the first subframe. 1230 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1231 * be done in the hardware. 1232 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1233 * frame 1234 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1235 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1236 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1237 * 1238 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1239 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1240 * - DATA3_CODING 1241 * - DATA5_GI 1242 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1243 * - DATA6_NSTS 1244 * - DATA3_STBC 1245 * 1246 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1247 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1248 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1249 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1250 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1251 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1252 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1253 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1254 */ 1255 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1256 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1257 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1258 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1259 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1260 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1261 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1262 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1263 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1264 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1265 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1266 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1267 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1268 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1269 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1270 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1271 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1272 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1273 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1274 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1275 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1276 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20), 1277 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1278 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1279 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1280 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1281 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1282 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1283 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1284 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1285 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1286 }; 1287 1288 /** 1289 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1290 * 1291 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1292 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1293 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1294 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1295 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1296 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1297 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1298 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1299 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1300 */ 1301 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1302 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1303 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1304 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1305 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1306 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1307 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1308 }; 1309 1310 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1311 1312 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1313 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1314 RX_ENC_HT, 1315 RX_ENC_VHT, 1316 RX_ENC_HE, 1317 }; 1318 1319 /** 1320 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1321 * 1322 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1323 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1324 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1325 * 1326 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1327 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1328 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1329 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1330 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1331 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1332 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1333 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1334 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1335 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1336 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1337 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1338 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1339 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1340 * values were filled. 1341 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1342 * support dB or unspecified units) 1343 * @antenna: antenna used 1344 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1345 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1346 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only) 1347 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1348 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1349 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1350 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1351 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1352 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1353 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1354 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1355 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1356 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1357 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1358 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1359 */ 1360 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1361 u64 mactime; 1362 u64 boottime_ns; 1363 u32 device_timestamp; 1364 u32 ampdu_reference; 1365 u32 flag; 1366 u16 freq; 1367 u8 enc_flags; 1368 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3; 1369 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1; 1370 u8 rate_idx; 1371 u8 nss; 1372 u8 rx_flags; 1373 u8 band; 1374 u8 antenna; 1375 s8 signal; 1376 u8 chains; 1377 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1378 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1379 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1380 }; 1381 1382 /** 1383 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information 1384 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace 1385 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more 1386 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that) 1387 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed 1388 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace 1389 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment) 1390 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1! 1391 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI 1392 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace 1393 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done 1394 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the 1395 * @data field. 1396 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that 1397 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd 1398 * length 1399 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data 1400 * 1401 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before 1402 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns 1403 * data. 1404 */ 1405 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap { 1406 u32 present; 1407 u8 align; 1408 u8 oui[3]; 1409 u8 subns; 1410 u8 pad; 1411 u16 len; 1412 u8 data[]; 1413 } __packed; 1414 1415 /** 1416 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1417 * 1418 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1419 * 1420 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1421 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1422 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1423 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1424 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1425 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1426 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1427 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1428 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1429 * for more. 1430 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1431 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1432 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1433 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1434 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1435 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1436 * operating channel. 1437 */ 1438 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1439 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1440 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1441 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1442 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1443 }; 1444 1445 1446 /** 1447 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1448 * 1449 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1450 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1451 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1452 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1453 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1454 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1455 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1456 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1457 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1458 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1459 */ 1460 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1461 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1462 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1463 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1464 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1465 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1466 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1467 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1468 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1469 }; 1470 1471 /** 1472 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1473 * 1474 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1475 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1476 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1477 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1478 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1479 */ 1480 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1481 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1482 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1483 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1484 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1485 1486 /* keep last */ 1487 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1488 }; 1489 1490 /** 1491 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1492 * 1493 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1494 * 1495 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1496 * 1497 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1498 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1499 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1500 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1501 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1502 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1503 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1504 * 1505 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1506 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1507 * 1508 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1509 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1510 * 1511 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1512 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1513 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1514 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1515 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1516 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1517 * 1518 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1519 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1520 * configured for an HT channel. 1521 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1522 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1523 */ 1524 struct ieee80211_conf { 1525 u32 flags; 1526 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1527 1528 u16 listen_interval; 1529 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1530 1531 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1532 1533 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1534 bool radar_enabled; 1535 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1536 }; 1537 1538 /** 1539 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1540 * 1541 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1542 * operation. 1543 * 1544 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1545 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1546 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1547 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1548 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1549 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1550 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1551 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1552 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1553 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1554 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1555 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1556 * channel, expressed in TU. 1557 */ 1558 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1559 u64 timestamp; 1560 u32 device_timestamp; 1561 bool block_tx; 1562 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1563 u8 count; 1564 u32 delay; 1565 }; 1566 1567 /** 1568 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1569 * 1570 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1571 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1572 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1573 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1574 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1575 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1576 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1577 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1578 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1579 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1580 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1581 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1582 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1583 */ 1584 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1585 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1586 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1587 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1588 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1589 }; 1590 1591 /** 1592 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1593 * 1594 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1595 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1596 * 1597 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1598 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1599 * or the BSS we're associated to 1600 * @addr: address of this interface 1601 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1602 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1603 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is 1604 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 1605 * for read access. 1606 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 1607 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1608 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1609 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1610 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1611 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1612 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1613 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 1614 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 1615 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 1616 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 1617 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 1618 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1619 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1620 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1621 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1622 * interface. 1623 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1624 * sizeof(void \*). 1625 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction) 1626 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped, 1627 * protected by fq->lock. 1628 */ 1629 struct ieee80211_vif { 1630 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1631 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1632 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1633 bool p2p; 1634 bool csa_active; 1635 bool mu_mimo_owner; 1636 1637 u8 cab_queue; 1638 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1639 1640 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1641 1642 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 1643 1644 u32 driver_flags; 1645 1646 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1647 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1648 #endif 1649 1650 unsigned int probe_req_reg; 1651 1652 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1653 1654 /* must be last */ 1655 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1656 }; 1657 1658 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1659 { 1660 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1661 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1662 #endif 1663 return false; 1664 } 1665 1666 /** 1667 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1668 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1669 * 1670 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1671 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1672 * 1673 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1674 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1675 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1676 */ 1677 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1678 1679 /** 1680 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1681 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1682 * 1683 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1684 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1685 * 1686 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1687 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1688 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1689 */ 1690 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1691 1692 /** 1693 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1694 * 1695 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 1696 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 1697 * 1698 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 1699 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 1700 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 1701 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 1702 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 1703 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 1704 * generation in software. 1705 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 1706 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 1707 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 1708 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 1709 * (MFP) to be done in software. 1710 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 1711 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 1712 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 1713 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 1714 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 1715 * MIC. 1716 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 1717 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 1718 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 1719 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 1720 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 1721 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 1722 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 1723 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 1724 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 1725 * only for management frames (MFP). 1726 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 1727 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 1728 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 1729 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 1730 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 1731 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 1732 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 1733 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 1734 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 1735 * generation only 1736 */ 1737 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 1738 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 1739 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 1740 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 1741 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 1742 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 1743 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 1744 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 1745 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 1746 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 1747 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 1748 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 1749 }; 1750 1751 /** 1752 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 1753 * 1754 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 1755 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 1756 * 1757 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 1758 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 1759 * encrypted in hardware. 1760 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 1761 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 1762 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 1763 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 1764 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 1765 * @keylen: key material length 1766 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 1767 * data block: 1768 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 1769 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 1770 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 1771 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 1772 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 1773 */ 1774 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 1775 atomic64_t tx_pn; 1776 u32 cipher; 1777 u8 icv_len; 1778 u8 iv_len; 1779 u8 hw_key_idx; 1780 s8 keyidx; 1781 u16 flags; 1782 u8 keylen; 1783 u8 key[0]; 1784 }; 1785 1786 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 1787 1788 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 1789 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 1790 1791 /** 1792 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 1793 * 1794 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 1795 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1796 * reverse order than in packet) 1797 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1798 * reverse order than in packet) 1799 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1800 * reverse order than in packet) 1801 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1802 * reverse order than in packet) 1803 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 1804 */ 1805 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 1806 union { 1807 struct { 1808 u32 iv32; 1809 u16 iv16; 1810 } tkip; 1811 struct { 1812 u8 pn[6]; 1813 } ccmp; 1814 struct { 1815 u8 pn[6]; 1816 } aes_cmac; 1817 struct { 1818 u8 pn[6]; 1819 } aes_gmac; 1820 struct { 1821 u8 pn[6]; 1822 } gcmp; 1823 struct { 1824 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 1825 u8 seq_len; 1826 } hw; 1827 }; 1828 }; 1829 1830 /** 1831 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme 1832 * 1833 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining 1834 * the secure packet crypto handling. 1835 * 1836 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector 1837 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage 1838 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher 1839 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header 1840 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header 1841 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header 1842 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits 1843 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx 1844 * key_idx value calculation: 1845 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift 1846 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes 1847 */ 1848 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme { 1849 u32 cipher; 1850 u16 iftype; 1851 u8 hdr_len; 1852 u8 pn_len; 1853 u8 pn_off; 1854 u8 key_idx_off; 1855 u8 key_idx_mask; 1856 u8 key_idx_shift; 1857 u8 mic_len; 1858 }; 1859 1860 /** 1861 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 1862 * 1863 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 1864 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 1865 * 1866 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 1867 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 1868 */ 1869 enum set_key_cmd { 1870 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 1871 }; 1872 1873 /** 1874 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 1875 * 1876 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 1877 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 1878 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 1879 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 1880 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 1881 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 1882 */ 1883 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 1884 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 1885 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 1886 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 1887 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 1888 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 1889 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 1890 }; 1891 1892 /** 1893 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 1894 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 1895 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 1896 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 1897 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 1898 * (including 80+80 MHz) 1899 * 1900 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 1901 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 1902 */ 1903 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 1904 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 1905 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 1906 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 1907 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 1908 }; 1909 1910 /** 1911 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 1912 * 1913 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 1914 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 1915 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 1916 */ 1917 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 1918 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 1919 struct { 1920 s8 idx; 1921 u8 count; 1922 u8 count_cts; 1923 u8 count_rts; 1924 u16 flags; 1925 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 1926 }; 1927 1928 /** 1929 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 1930 * 1931 * Used to configure txpower for station. 1932 * 1933 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 1934 * to the STA. 1935 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 1936 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 1937 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 1938 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 1939 * per peer TPC. 1940 */ 1941 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 1942 s16 power; 1943 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 1944 }; 1945 1946 /** 1947 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 1948 * 1949 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 1950 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 1951 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 1952 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 1953 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 1954 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 1955 * 1956 * @addr: MAC address 1957 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 1958 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band) 1959 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 1960 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 1961 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 1962 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 1963 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 1964 * Can be modified by driver. 1965 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 1966 * otherwise always false) 1967 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1968 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 1969 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 1970 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 1971 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 1972 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 1973 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 1974 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 1975 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 1976 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 1977 * the station moves to associated state. 1978 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 1979 * @rates: rate control selection table 1980 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 1981 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 1982 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 1983 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 1984 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 1985 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 1986 * unlimited. 1987 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 1988 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 1989 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 1990 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that 1991 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames 1992 */ 1993 struct ieee80211_sta { 1994 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1995 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 1996 u16 aid; 1997 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 1998 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 1999 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2000 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2001 bool wme; 2002 u8 uapsd_queues; 2003 u8 max_sp; 2004 u8 rx_nss; 2005 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2006 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2007 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2008 bool tdls; 2009 bool tdls_initiator; 2010 bool mfp; 2011 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2012 2013 /** 2014 * @max_amsdu_len: 2015 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2016 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2017 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2018 * 2019 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2020 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2021 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2022 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2023 * 2024 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2025 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2026 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2027 */ 2028 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2029 bool support_p2p_ps; 2030 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2031 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2032 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2033 2034 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2035 2036 /* must be last */ 2037 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2038 }; 2039 2040 /** 2041 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2042 * 2043 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2044 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2045 * 2046 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2047 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2048 */ 2049 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2050 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2051 }; 2052 2053 /** 2054 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2055 * 2056 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2057 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2058 */ 2059 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2060 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2061 }; 2062 2063 /** 2064 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2065 * 2066 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2067 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2068 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2069 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2070 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2071 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2072 * 2073 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2074 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2075 */ 2076 struct ieee80211_txq { 2077 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2078 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2079 u8 tid; 2080 u8 ac; 2081 2082 /* must be last */ 2083 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2084 }; 2085 2086 /** 2087 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2088 * 2089 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2090 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2091 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2092 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2093 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2094 * 2095 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2096 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2097 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2098 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2099 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2100 * algorithm. 2101 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2102 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2103 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2104 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2105 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2106 * CCK frames. 2107 * 2108 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2109 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2110 * the FCS at the end. 2111 * 2112 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2113 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2114 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2115 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2116 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2117 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2118 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2119 * 2120 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2121 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2122 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2123 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2124 * 2125 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2126 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2127 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2128 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2129 * 2130 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2131 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2132 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2133 * 2134 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2135 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2136 * 2137 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2138 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2139 * 2140 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2141 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2142 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2143 * 2144 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2145 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2146 * 2147 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2148 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2149 * 2150 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2151 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2152 * the stack. 2153 * 2154 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2155 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2156 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2157 * 2158 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2159 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2160 * dtim_period). 2161 * 2162 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2163 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2164 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2165 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2166 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2167 * only in that case. 2168 * 2169 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2170 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2171 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2172 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2173 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2174 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2175 * 2176 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2177 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2178 * software. 2179 * 2180 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2181 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2182 * active interfaces. 2183 * 2184 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2185 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2186 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2187 * 2188 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2189 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2190 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2191 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2192 * supported cipher suites. 2193 * 2194 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2195 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2196 * for frames. 2197 * 2198 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2199 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2200 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2201 * control for more details. 2202 * 2203 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2204 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2205 * 2206 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2207 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2208 * is supported. 2209 * 2210 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2211 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2212 * 2213 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2214 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2215 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2216 * 2217 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2218 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2219 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2220 * CSA frame. 2221 * 2222 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2223 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2224 * 2225 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2226 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2227 * 2228 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2229 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2230 * 2231 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2232 * within A-MPDU. 2233 * 2234 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2235 * for sent beacons. 2236 * 2237 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2238 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2239 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2240 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2241 * 2242 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2243 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2244 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2245 * timeout. 2246 * 2247 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2248 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2249 * 2250 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2251 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2252 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2253 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2254 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2255 * 2256 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2257 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2258 * 2259 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2260 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2261 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2262 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2263 * 2264 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2265 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2266 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2267 * 2268 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2269 * TDLS links. 2270 * 2271 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2272 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2273 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2274 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2275 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2276 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2277 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2278 * 2279 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2280 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2281 * 2282 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2283 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2284 * 2285 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2286 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2287 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2288 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2289 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2290 * 2291 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2292 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2293 * TXQs to start with. 2294 * 2295 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2296 * length in tx status information 2297 * 2298 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2299 * 2300 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2301 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2302 * 2303 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2304 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2305 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2306 * 2307 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2308 */ 2309 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2310 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2311 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2312 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2313 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2314 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2315 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2316 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2317 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2318 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2319 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2320 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2321 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2322 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2323 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2324 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2325 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2326 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2327 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2328 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2329 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2330 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2331 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2332 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2333 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2334 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2335 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2336 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2337 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2338 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2339 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2340 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2341 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2342 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2343 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2344 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2345 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2346 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2347 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2348 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2349 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2350 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2351 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2352 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2353 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2354 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2355 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2356 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2357 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2358 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2359 2360 /* keep last, obviously */ 2361 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2362 }; 2363 2364 /** 2365 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2366 * 2367 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2368 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2369 * 2370 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2371 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2372 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2373 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2374 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2375 * 2376 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2377 * 2378 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2379 * along with this structure. 2380 * 2381 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2382 * 2383 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2384 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2385 * 2386 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2387 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2388 * 2389 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2390 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2391 * 2392 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2393 * that HW supports 2394 * 2395 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2396 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2397 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2398 * 2399 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2400 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2401 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2402 * 2403 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2404 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2405 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2406 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2407 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2408 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2409 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2410 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2411 * 2412 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2413 * can handle. 2414 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2415 * the hw can report back. 2416 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2417 * 2418 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2419 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2420 * aggregation. 2421 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2422 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2423 * it shouldn't be set. 2424 * 2425 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2426 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2427 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2428 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2429 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2430 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2431 * 2432 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2433 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2434 * 2435 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2436 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2437 * 2438 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2439 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2440 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2441 * adding _BW is supported today. 2442 * 2443 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2444 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2445 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2446 * 2447 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2448 * 2449 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2450 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2451 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2452 * device_timestamp. 2453 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2454 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2455 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2456 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2457 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2458 * 2459 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2460 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2461 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2462 * 2463 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2464 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2465 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2466 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2467 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2468 * neither enabled. 2469 * 2470 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2471 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2472 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2473 * 2474 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions. 2475 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions 2476 * supported by HW. 2477 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2478 * device. 2479 * 2480 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2481 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2482 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2483 * 2484 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2485 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2486 * 2487 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2488 */ 2489 struct ieee80211_hw { 2490 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2491 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2492 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2493 void *priv; 2494 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2495 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2496 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2497 int vif_data_size; 2498 int sta_data_size; 2499 int chanctx_data_size; 2500 int txq_data_size; 2501 u16 queues; 2502 u16 max_listen_interval; 2503 s8 max_signal; 2504 u8 max_rates; 2505 u8 max_report_rates; 2506 u8 max_rate_tries; 2507 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2508 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2509 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2510 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2511 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2512 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2513 struct { 2514 int units_pos; 2515 s16 accuracy; 2516 } radiotap_timestamp; 2517 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2518 u8 uapsd_queues; 2519 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2520 u8 n_cipher_schemes; 2521 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes; 2522 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2523 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2524 u8 weight_multiplier; 2525 u32 max_mtu; 2526 }; 2527 2528 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2529 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2530 { 2531 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2532 } 2533 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2534 2535 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2536 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2537 { 2538 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2539 } 2540 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2541 2542 /** 2543 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2544 * 2545 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2546 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2547 */ 2548 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2549 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2550 2551 /* Keep last */ 2552 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2553 }; 2554 2555 /** 2556 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2557 * 2558 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2559 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2560 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2561 * @status: channel-switch response status 2562 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2563 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2564 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2565 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2566 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2567 */ 2568 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2569 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2570 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2571 u8 action_code; 2572 u32 status; 2573 u32 timestamp; 2574 u16 switch_time; 2575 u16 switch_timeout; 2576 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2577 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2578 }; 2579 2580 /** 2581 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2582 * 2583 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2584 * 2585 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2586 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2587 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2588 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2589 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2590 * 2591 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2592 */ 2593 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2594 2595 /** 2596 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2597 * 2598 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2599 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2600 */ 2601 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2602 { 2603 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2604 } 2605 2606 /** 2607 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2608 * 2609 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 2610 * @addr: the address to set 2611 */ 2612 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 2613 { 2614 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 2615 } 2616 2617 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2618 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2619 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2620 { 2621 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 2622 return NULL; 2623 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 2624 } 2625 2626 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2627 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2628 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2629 { 2630 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 2631 return NULL; 2632 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 2633 } 2634 2635 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2636 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2637 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 2638 { 2639 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 2640 return NULL; 2641 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 2642 } 2643 2644 /** 2645 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 2646 * @hw: the hardware 2647 * @skb: the skb 2648 * 2649 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 2650 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 2651 */ 2652 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 2653 2654 /** 2655 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 2656 * 2657 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 2658 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 2659 * 2660 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 2661 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 2662 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 2663 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 2664 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 2665 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 2666 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 2667 * 2668 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 2669 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 2670 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 2671 * 2672 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 2673 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 2674 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 2675 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range. 2676 * 2677 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 2678 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 2679 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 2680 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 2681 * 2682 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 2683 * 2684 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 2685 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any 2686 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 2687 * based on the receive flags. 2688 * 2689 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 2690 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 2691 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 2692 * keys. 2693 * 2694 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 2695 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 2696 * handler. 2697 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 2698 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 2699 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 2700 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 2701 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 2702 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 2703 * 2704 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 2705 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 2706 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 2707 * 2708 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 2709 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following 2710 * requirements: 2711 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to 2712 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been 2713 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key, 2714 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 2715 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 2716 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 2717 encrypted with the new key and 2718 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 2719 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 2720 */ 2721 2722 /** 2723 * DOC: Powersave support 2724 * 2725 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 2726 * 2727 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself, 2728 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 2729 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 2730 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 2731 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 2732 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 2733 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 2734 * it finds traffic directed to it. 2735 * 2736 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 2737 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 2738 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 2739 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 2740 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 2741 * 2742 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 2743 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 2744 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 2745 * 2746 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 2747 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 2748 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 2749 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 2750 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 2751 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 2752 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that. 2753 * 2754 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 2755 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 2756 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 2757 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when 2758 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 2759 * periods. 2760 * 2761 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 2762 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 2763 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 2764 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 2765 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 2766 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 2767 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 2768 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 2769 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 2770 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 2771 * 2772 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 2773 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 2774 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 2775 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 2776 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 2777 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 2778 * 2779 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 2780 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 2781 */ 2782 2783 /** 2784 * DOC: Beacon filter support 2785 * 2786 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 2787 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 2788 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 2789 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 2790 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 2791 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 2792 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 2793 * 2794 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 2795 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 2796 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 2797 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 2798 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 2799 * 2800 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 2801 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 2802 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 2803 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 2804 * 2805 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 2806 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 2807 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 2808 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 2809 * 2810 * - a list of information element IDs 2811 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 2812 * 2813 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 2814 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 2815 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 2816 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 2817 * vendor information elements. 2818 * 2819 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 2820 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 2821 * 2822 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing 2823 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 2824 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 2825 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 2826 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 2827 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 2828 * 2829 * 2830 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 2831 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 2832 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 2833 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when 2834 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 2835 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 2836 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 2837 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 2838 * 2839 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 2840 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 2841 * signal strength threshold checking. 2842 */ 2843 2844 /** 2845 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 2846 * 2847 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 2848 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 2849 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 2850 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 2851 * 2852 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 2853 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 2854 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 2855 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 2856 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 2857 * hardware flags. 2858 * 2859 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 2860 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 2861 * turned off otherwise. 2862 * 2863 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 2864 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 2865 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 2866 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 2867 */ 2868 2869 /** 2870 * DOC: Frame filtering 2871 * 2872 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 2873 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 2874 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 2875 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 2876 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 2877 * 2878 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 2879 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 2880 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 2881 * 2882 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 2883 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 2884 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 2885 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 2886 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 2887 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 2888 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 2889 * 2890 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 2891 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 2892 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 2893 * or dropped. 2894 * 2895 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 2896 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 2897 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 2898 * the flag, but not clear it. 2899 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 2900 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 2901 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 2902 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 2903 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 2904 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 2905 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 2906 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 2907 */ 2908 2909 /** 2910 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 2911 * 2912 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 2913 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 2914 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 2915 * 2916 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 2917 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 2918 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 2919 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 2920 * the driver code. 2921 * 2922 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 2923 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 2924 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 2925 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 2926 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 2927 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 2928 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 2929 * 2930 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 2931 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 2932 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 2933 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 2934 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 2935 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 2936 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 2937 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 2938 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 2939 * @sta_notify callback. 2940 * 2941 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 2942 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 2943 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 2944 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 2945 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 2946 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 2947 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 2948 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 2949 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 2950 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 2951 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 2952 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 2953 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 2954 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 2955 * 2956 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 2957 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 2958 * 2959 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 2960 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 2961 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 2962 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 2963 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 2964 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 2965 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 2966 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 2967 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 2968 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 2969 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 2970 * 2971 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 2972 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 2973 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 2974 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 2975 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 2976 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 2977 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 2978 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 2979 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 2980 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames, 2981 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 2982 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 2983 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 2984 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 2985 * 2986 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 2987 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 2988 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 2989 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 2990 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 2991 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 2992 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 2993 * 2994 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 2995 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 2996 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 2997 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 2998 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 2999 * 3000 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3001 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3002 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3003 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3004 */ 3005 3006 /** 3007 * DOC: HW queue control 3008 * 3009 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3010 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3011 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3012 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3013 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3014 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3015 * 3016 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3017 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3018 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3019 * 3020 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3021 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3022 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3023 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3024 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3025 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3026 * the hardware queue. 3027 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3028 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3029 * 3030 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual 3031 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3032 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3033 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3034 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3035 * 3036 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3037 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3038 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3039 * off-channel queue: 9 3040 * 3041 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3042 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3043 * 3044 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3045 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3046 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3047 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3048 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3049 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3050 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3051 * 3052 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3053 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3054 * 3055 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3056 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3057 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3058 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3059 */ 3060 3061 /** 3062 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3063 * 3064 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3065 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3066 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3067 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3068 * 3069 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3070 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3071 * multicast address. 3072 * 3073 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3074 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3075 * 3076 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3077 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3078 * 3079 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3080 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3081 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3082 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3083 * honour this flag if possible. 3084 * 3085 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3086 * station 3087 * 3088 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3089 * 3090 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3091 * 3092 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3093 */ 3094 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3095 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3096 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3097 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3098 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3099 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3100 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3101 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3102 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3103 }; 3104 3105 /** 3106 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3107 * 3108 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3109 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3110 * 3111 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3112 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3113 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3114 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3115 * 3116 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3117 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3118 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3119 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or return the special 3120 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3121 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3122 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3123 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3124 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3125 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3126 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3127 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3128 * session is gone and removes the station. 3129 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3130 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3131 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3132 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3133 */ 3134 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3135 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3136 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3137 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3138 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3139 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3140 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3141 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3142 }; 3143 3144 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3145 3146 /** 3147 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3148 * 3149 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3150 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3151 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3152 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3153 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3154 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3155 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3156 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3157 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3158 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3159 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3160 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3161 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3162 */ 3163 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3164 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3165 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3166 u16 tid; 3167 u16 ssn; 3168 u16 buf_size; 3169 bool amsdu; 3170 u16 timeout; 3171 }; 3172 3173 /** 3174 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3175 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3176 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3177 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3178 */ 3179 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3180 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3181 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3182 }; 3183 3184 /** 3185 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3186 * 3187 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3188 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3189 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3190 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3191 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3192 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3193 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3194 * the peer. 3195 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3196 * by the peer 3197 */ 3198 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3199 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3200 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3201 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3202 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3203 }; 3204 3205 /** 3206 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3207 * 3208 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3209 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3210 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3211 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3212 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3213 * 3214 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3215 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3216 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3217 */ 3218 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3219 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3220 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3221 }; 3222 3223 /** 3224 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type 3225 * 3226 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3227 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3228 * 3229 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3230 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3231 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3232 * of wowlan configuration) 3233 */ 3234 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3235 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3236 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3237 }; 3238 3239 /** 3240 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3241 * 3242 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3243 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3244 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3245 * 3246 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3247 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3248 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3249 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3250 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3251 * Must be atomic. 3252 * 3253 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3254 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3255 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3256 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3257 * or zero. 3258 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3259 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3260 * is added. 3261 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3262 * 3263 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3264 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3265 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3266 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3267 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3268 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3269 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3270 * 3271 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3272 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3273 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3274 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3275 * reconfigured at resume time. 3276 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3277 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3278 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3279 * must return 1 from this function. 3280 * 3281 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3282 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3283 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3284 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3285 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3286 * 3287 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3288 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3289 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3290 * in suspend(). 3291 * 3292 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3293 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3294 * and @stop must be implemented. 3295 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3296 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3297 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3298 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3299 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3300 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3301 * 3302 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3303 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3304 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3305 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3306 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3307 * 3308 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3309 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3310 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3311 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3312 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3313 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3314 * MAC address of the device going away. 3315 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3316 * 3317 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3318 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3319 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3320 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3321 * 3322 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3323 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3324 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3325 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3326 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3327 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3328 * can sleep. 3329 * 3330 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3331 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3332 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3333 * 3334 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3335 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3336 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3337 * 3338 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3339 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3340 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3341 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3342 * which flags are changed. 3343 * This callback can sleep. 3344 * 3345 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3346 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3347 * 3348 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3349 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3350 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3351 * is enabled. 3352 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3353 * The callback can sleep. 3354 * 3355 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3356 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3357 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3358 * The callback must be atomic. 3359 * 3360 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3361 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3362 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3363 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3364 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3365 * 3366 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3367 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3368 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3369 * 3370 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3371 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3372 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3373 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3374 * that power save is disabled. 3375 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3376 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3377 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3378 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3379 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3380 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3381 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3382 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3383 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3384 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3385 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3386 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3387 * The callback can sleep. 3388 * 3389 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3390 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3391 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3392 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3393 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3394 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3395 * The callback can sleep. 3396 * 3397 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3398 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3399 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3400 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3401 * 3402 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3403 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3404 * 3405 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3406 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3407 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3408 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3409 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3410 * 3411 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3412 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3413 * this notification. 3414 * The callback can sleep. 3415 * 3416 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3417 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3418 * The callback can sleep. 3419 * 3420 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3421 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3422 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3423 * The callback must be atomic. 3424 * 3425 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3426 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3427 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3428 * should be set as well. 3429 * The callback can sleep. 3430 * 3431 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3432 * The callback can sleep. 3433 * 3434 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3435 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3436 * 3437 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3438 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3439 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3440 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3441 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3442 * This callback can sleep. 3443 * 3444 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3445 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3446 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3447 * callback can sleep. 3448 * 3449 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3450 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3451 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3452 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3453 * 3454 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3455 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3456 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3457 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3458 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3459 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3460 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3461 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3462 * The callback can sleep. 3463 * 3464 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3465 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3466 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3467 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3468 * in @sta_state. 3469 * The callback can sleep. 3470 * 3471 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3472 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3473 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3474 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3475 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3476 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3477 * Must be atomic. 3478 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3479 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3480 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3481 * 3482 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3483 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3484 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3485 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3486 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3487 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3488 * The callback can sleep. 3489 * 3490 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3491 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3492 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3493 * The callback can sleep. 3494 * 3495 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3496 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3497 * required function. 3498 * The callback can sleep. 3499 * 3500 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3501 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3502 * required function. 3503 * The callback can sleep. 3504 * 3505 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3506 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3507 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3508 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3509 * The callback can sleep. 3510 * 3511 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3512 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3513 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3514 * TSF synchronization. 3515 * The callback can sleep. 3516 * 3517 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3518 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3519 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3520 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3521 * The callback can sleep. 3522 * 3523 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3524 * 3525 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3526 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3527 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3528 * The callback can sleep. 3529 * 3530 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3531 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3532 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3533 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3534 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3535 * 3536 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3537 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3538 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3539 * 3540 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3541 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3542 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3543 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3544 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3545 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3546 * The callback can sleep. 3547 * 3548 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 3549 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 3550 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 3551 * completion of the channel switch. 3552 * 3553 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 3554 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 3555 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 3556 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 3557 * 3558 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 3559 * 3560 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 3561 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 3562 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 3563 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 3564 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 3565 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 3566 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 3567 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 3568 * must be accepted in this case. 3569 * This callback may sleep. 3570 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 3571 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 3572 * 3573 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 3574 * 3575 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 3576 * 3577 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 3578 * queues before entering power save. 3579 * 3580 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 3581 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 3582 * The callback can sleep. 3583 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 3584 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 3585 * The callback must be atomic. 3586 * 3587 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 3588 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 3589 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 3590 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 3591 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 3592 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 3593 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 3594 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 3595 * more-data bit must always be set. 3596 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 3597 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 3598 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 3599 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 3600 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3601 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 3602 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 3603 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 3604 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 3605 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 3606 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 3607 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 3608 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 3609 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 3610 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 3611 * This callback must be atomic. 3612 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 3613 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 3614 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 3615 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 3616 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 3617 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 3618 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3619 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 3620 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 3621 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 3622 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 3623 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 3624 * This callback must be atomic. 3625 * 3626 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 3627 * 3628 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 3629 * 3630 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 3631 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 3632 * 3633 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 3634 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 3635 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 3636 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 3637 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 3638 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 3639 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 3640 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 3641 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 3642 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 3643 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 3644 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 3645 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 3646 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 3647 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the 3648 * duration for which the operation is requested. 3649 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 3650 * 3651 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 3652 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 3653 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 3654 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 3655 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 3656 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 3657 * 2 * (DTIM period). 3658 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 3659 * 3660 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 3661 * This callback may sleep. 3662 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 3663 * This callback may sleep. 3664 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 3665 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 3666 * channel context with different settings 3667 * This callback may sleep. 3668 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 3669 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 3670 * This callback may sleep. 3671 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 3672 * unbound from vif. 3673 * This callback may sleep. 3674 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 3675 * another, as specified in the list of 3676 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 3677 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 3678 * This callback may sleep. 3679 * 3680 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 3681 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 3682 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 3683 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 3684 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 3685 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 3686 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 3687 * 3688 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 3689 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 3690 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 3691 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 3692 * This callback may sleep. 3693 * 3694 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 3695 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 3696 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 3697 * 3698 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 3699 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 3700 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 3701 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 3702 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 3703 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 3704 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been 3705 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 3706 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 3707 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 3708 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3709 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 3710 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 3711 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 3712 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3713 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 3714 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3715 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3716 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 3717 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3718 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 3719 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 3720 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 3721 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 3722 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 3723 * channel context is bound before this is called. 3724 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 3725 * 3726 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 3727 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 3728 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 3729 * 3730 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 3731 * and hardware limits. 3732 * 3733 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 3734 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 3735 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 3736 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 3737 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 3738 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 3739 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 3740 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 3741 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 3742 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 3743 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 3744 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 3745 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 3746 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 3747 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 3748 * the function call. 3749 * 3750 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 3751 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 3752 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 3753 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 3754 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 3755 * 3756 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 3757 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 3758 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 3759 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 3760 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 3761 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 3762 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 3763 * changed parameters. 3764 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 3765 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 3766 * this call. 3767 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 3768 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 3769 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 3770 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 3771 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 3772 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 3773 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 3774 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 3775 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 3776 * 3777 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 3778 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 3779 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 3780 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 3781 * This callback may sleep. 3782 */ 3783 struct ieee80211_ops { 3784 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3785 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 3786 struct sk_buff *skb); 3787 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3788 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3789 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 3790 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 3791 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3792 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 3793 #endif 3794 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3795 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3796 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3797 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3798 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 3799 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3800 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3801 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 3802 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3803 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3804 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 3805 u32 changed); 3806 3807 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3808 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3809 3810 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3811 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 3812 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3813 unsigned int changed_flags, 3814 unsigned int *total_flags, 3815 u64 multicast); 3816 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3817 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3818 unsigned int filter_flags, 3819 unsigned int changed_flags); 3820 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3821 bool set); 3822 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 3823 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3824 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 3825 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3826 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3827 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 3828 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3829 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 3830 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3831 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3832 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 3833 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3834 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 3835 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3836 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 3837 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3838 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3839 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3840 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3841 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 3842 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 3843 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3844 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3845 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3846 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3847 const u8 *mac_addr); 3848 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3849 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3850 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3851 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 3852 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3853 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 3854 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 3855 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3856 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3857 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3858 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3859 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3860 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3861 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 3862 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3863 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3864 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3865 struct dentry *dir); 3866 #endif 3867 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3868 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3869 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3870 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3871 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3872 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3873 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3874 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 3875 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 3876 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3877 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3878 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3879 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3880 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3881 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3882 u32 changed); 3883 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3884 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3885 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3886 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3887 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3888 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3889 struct station_info *sinfo); 3890 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3891 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac, 3892 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 3893 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3894 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3895 u64 tsf); 3896 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3897 s64 offset); 3898 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3899 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3900 3901 /** 3902 * @ampdu_action: 3903 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 3904 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 3905 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 3906 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3907 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 3908 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 3909 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 3910 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 3911 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 3912 * 3913 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 3914 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 3915 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 3916 * 3917 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 3918 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 3919 * 3920 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 3921 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 3922 * - ``TX: 81`` 3923 * 3924 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 3925 * 3926 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 3927 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 3928 * if the session can start immediately. 3929 * 3930 * The callback can sleep. 3931 */ 3932 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3933 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3934 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 3935 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 3936 struct survey_info *survey); 3937 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3938 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 3939 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 3940 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3941 void *data, int len); 3942 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 3943 struct netlink_callback *cb, 3944 void *data, int len); 3945 #endif 3946 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3947 u32 queues, bool drop); 3948 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3949 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3950 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 3951 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 3952 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 3953 3954 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3955 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3956 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 3957 int duration, 3958 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 3959 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3960 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3961 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 3962 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3963 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 3964 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3965 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3966 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 3967 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3968 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3969 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 3970 3971 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3972 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3973 u16 tids, int num_frames, 3974 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 3975 bool more_data); 3976 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3977 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3978 u16 tids, int num_frames, 3979 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 3980 bool more_data); 3981 3982 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3983 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 3984 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3985 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3986 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 3987 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3988 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3989 u32 sset, u8 *data); 3990 3991 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3992 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3993 u16 duration); 3994 3995 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3996 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3997 3998 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3999 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4000 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4001 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4002 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4003 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4004 u32 changed); 4005 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4006 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4007 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4008 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4009 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4010 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4011 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4012 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4013 int n_vifs, 4014 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4015 4016 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4017 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4018 4019 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4020 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4021 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4022 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4023 #endif 4024 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4025 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4026 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4027 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4028 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4029 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4030 4031 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4032 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4033 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4034 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4035 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4036 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4037 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4038 4039 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4040 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4041 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4042 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4043 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4044 int *dbm); 4045 4046 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4047 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4048 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4049 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4050 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4051 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4052 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4053 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4054 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4055 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4056 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4057 4058 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4059 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4060 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4061 4062 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4063 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4064 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4065 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4066 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4067 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4068 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4069 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4070 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4071 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4072 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4073 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4074 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4075 u8 instance_id); 4076 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4077 struct sk_buff *head, 4078 struct sk_buff *skb); 4079 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4080 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4081 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4082 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4083 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4084 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4085 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4086 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4087 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4088 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4089 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4090 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4091 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4092 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4093 }; 4094 4095 /** 4096 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4097 * 4098 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4099 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4100 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4101 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4102 * @priv_data_len. 4103 * 4104 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4105 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4106 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4107 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4108 * 4109 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4110 */ 4111 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4112 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4113 const char *requested_name); 4114 4115 /** 4116 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4117 * 4118 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4119 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4120 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4121 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4122 * @priv_data_len. 4123 * 4124 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4125 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4126 * 4127 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4128 */ 4129 static inline 4130 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4131 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4132 { 4133 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4134 } 4135 4136 /** 4137 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4138 * 4139 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4140 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4141 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4142 * 4143 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4144 * 4145 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4146 */ 4147 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4148 4149 /** 4150 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4151 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4152 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4153 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4154 */ 4155 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4156 int throughput; 4157 int blink_time; 4158 }; 4159 4160 /** 4161 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4162 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4163 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4164 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4165 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4166 */ 4167 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4168 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4169 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4170 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4171 }; 4172 4173 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4174 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4175 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4176 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4177 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4178 const char * 4179 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4180 unsigned int flags, 4181 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4182 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4183 #endif 4184 /** 4185 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4186 * 4187 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4188 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4189 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4190 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4191 * 4192 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4193 * 4194 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4195 */ 4196 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4197 { 4198 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4199 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4200 #else 4201 return NULL; 4202 #endif 4203 } 4204 4205 /** 4206 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4207 * 4208 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4209 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4210 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4211 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4212 * 4213 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4214 * 4215 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4216 */ 4217 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4218 { 4219 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4220 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4221 #else 4222 return NULL; 4223 #endif 4224 } 4225 4226 /** 4227 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4228 * 4229 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4230 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4231 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4232 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4233 * 4234 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4235 * 4236 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4237 */ 4238 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4239 { 4240 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4241 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4242 #else 4243 return NULL; 4244 #endif 4245 } 4246 4247 /** 4248 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4249 * 4250 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4251 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4252 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4253 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4254 * 4255 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4256 * 4257 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4258 */ 4259 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4260 { 4261 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4262 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4263 #else 4264 return NULL; 4265 #endif 4266 } 4267 4268 /** 4269 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4270 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4271 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4272 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4273 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4274 * 4275 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4276 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4277 * 4278 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4279 */ 4280 static inline const char * 4281 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4282 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4283 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4284 { 4285 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4286 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4287 blink_table_len); 4288 #else 4289 return NULL; 4290 #endif 4291 } 4292 4293 /** 4294 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4295 * 4296 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4297 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4298 * 4299 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4300 */ 4301 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4302 4303 /** 4304 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4305 * 4306 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4307 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4308 * before calling this function. 4309 * 4310 * @hw: the hardware to free 4311 */ 4312 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4313 4314 /** 4315 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4316 * 4317 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4318 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4319 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4320 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4321 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4322 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4323 * 4324 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4325 */ 4326 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4327 4328 /** 4329 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4330 * 4331 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4332 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4333 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4334 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4335 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4336 * 4337 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4338 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4339 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4340 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4341 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4342 * 4343 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4344 * 4345 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4346 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4347 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4348 * @napi: the NAPI context 4349 */ 4350 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4351 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4352 4353 /** 4354 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4355 * 4356 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4357 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4358 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4359 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4360 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4361 * 4362 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4363 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4364 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4365 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4366 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4367 * 4368 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4369 * 4370 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4371 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4372 */ 4373 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4374 { 4375 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4376 } 4377 4378 /** 4379 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4380 * 4381 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4382 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4383 * 4384 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4385 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4386 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4387 * 4388 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4389 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4390 */ 4391 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4392 4393 /** 4394 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4395 * 4396 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4397 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4398 * 4399 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4400 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4401 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4402 * 4403 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4404 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4405 */ 4406 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4407 struct sk_buff *skb) 4408 { 4409 local_bh_disable(); 4410 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 4411 local_bh_enable(); 4412 } 4413 4414 /** 4415 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 4416 * 4417 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 4418 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 4419 * entering/leaving PS mode. 4420 * 4421 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 4422 * 4423 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 4424 * each other. 4425 * 4426 * @sta: currently connected sta 4427 * @start: start or stop PS 4428 * 4429 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 4430 */ 4431 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 4432 4433 /** 4434 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 4435 * (in process context) 4436 * 4437 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 4438 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 4439 * applies. 4440 * 4441 * @sta: currently connected sta 4442 * @start: start or stop PS 4443 * 4444 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 4445 */ 4446 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4447 bool start) 4448 { 4449 int ret; 4450 4451 local_bh_disable(); 4452 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 4453 local_bh_enable(); 4454 4455 return ret; 4456 } 4457 4458 /** 4459 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 4460 * @sta: currently connected station 4461 * 4462 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4463 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 4464 * connected station was received. 4465 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4466 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 4467 * be serialized. 4468 */ 4469 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4470 4471 /** 4472 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 4473 * @sta: currently connected station 4474 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 4475 * 4476 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4477 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 4478 * from a connected station was received. 4479 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4480 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 4481 * serialized. 4482 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 4483 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 4484 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 4485 * checks. 4486 */ 4487 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 4488 4489 /* 4490 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 4491 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 4492 */ 4493 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 4494 4495 /** 4496 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 4497 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 4498 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 4499 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 4500 * 4501 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 4502 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 4503 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 4504 * 4505 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 4506 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 4507 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 4508 * call! Beware of the locking!) 4509 * 4510 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 4511 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 4512 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 4513 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 4514 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 4515 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 4516 * 4517 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 4518 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 4519 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 4520 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 4521 * use this API. 4522 */ 4523 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4524 u8 tid, bool buffered); 4525 4526 /** 4527 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 4528 * 4529 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 4530 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 4531 * rate selection table for the station entry. 4532 * 4533 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4534 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 4535 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 4536 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 4537 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 4538 */ 4539 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4540 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4541 struct sk_buff *skb, 4542 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 4543 int max_rates); 4544 4545 /** 4546 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 4547 * 4548 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 4549 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 4550 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 4551 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 4552 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 4553 * slow stations to starve). 4554 * 4555 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 4556 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 4557 */ 4558 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4559 u32 thr); 4560 4561 /** 4562 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 4563 * 4564 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 4565 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 4566 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 4567 * 4568 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4569 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 4570 * @info: tx status information 4571 */ 4572 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4573 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4574 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 4575 4576 /** 4577 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback 4578 * 4579 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 4580 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 4581 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 4582 * 4583 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4584 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 4585 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 4586 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4587 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4588 * 4589 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4590 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4591 */ 4592 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4593 struct sk_buff *skb); 4594 4595 /** 4596 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 4597 * 4598 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4599 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 4600 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 4601 * 4602 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4603 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4604 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4605 * 4606 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4607 * @status: tx status information 4608 */ 4609 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4610 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 4611 4612 /** 4613 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 4614 * 4615 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4616 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 4617 * specific skbs. 4618 * 4619 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4620 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4621 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4622 * 4623 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4624 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 4625 * (NULL for multicast packets) 4626 * @info: tx status information 4627 */ 4628 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4629 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4630 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 4631 { 4632 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 4633 .sta = sta, 4634 .info = info, 4635 }; 4636 4637 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 4638 } 4639 4640 /** 4641 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 4642 * 4643 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context. 4644 * 4645 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4646 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 4647 * for a single hardware. 4648 * 4649 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4650 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4651 */ 4652 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4653 struct sk_buff *skb) 4654 { 4655 local_bh_disable(); 4656 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb); 4657 local_bh_enable(); 4658 } 4659 4660 /** 4661 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 4662 * 4663 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context 4664 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4665 * 4666 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4667 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4668 * 4669 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4670 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4671 */ 4672 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4673 struct sk_buff *skb); 4674 4675 /** 4676 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format 4677 * 4678 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit 4679 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which 4680 * are are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap 4681 * 802.11 frames. 4682 * 4683 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4684 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all 4685 * calls in the same tx status family. 4686 * 4687 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4688 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted 4689 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4690 */ 4691 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4692 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4693 struct sk_buff *skb); 4694 4695 /** 4696 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 4697 * 4698 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 4699 * connected STA. 4700 * 4701 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 4702 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 4703 */ 4704 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 4705 4706 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2 4707 4708 /** 4709 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 4710 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 4711 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 4712 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 4713 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which 4714 * should be ignored. 4715 */ 4716 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 4717 u16 tim_offset; 4718 u16 tim_length; 4719 4720 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM]; 4721 }; 4722 4723 /** 4724 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 4725 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4726 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4727 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 4728 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 4729 * 4730 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4731 * obtain the beacon template. 4732 * 4733 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 4734 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 4735 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 4736 * applicable, the CSA count. 4737 * 4738 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4739 * 4740 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4741 */ 4742 struct sk_buff * 4743 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4744 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4745 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs); 4746 4747 /** 4748 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 4749 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4750 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4751 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 4752 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4753 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 4754 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 4755 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4756 * 4757 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4758 * obtain the beacon frame. 4759 * 4760 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 4761 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 4762 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 4763 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 4764 * 4765 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4766 * 4767 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4768 */ 4769 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4770 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4771 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length); 4772 4773 /** 4774 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 4775 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4776 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4777 * 4778 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4779 * 4780 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4781 */ 4782 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4783 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 4784 { 4785 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL); 4786 } 4787 4788 /** 4789 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter 4790 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4791 * 4792 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 4793 * This function is called implicitly when 4794 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 4795 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 4796 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters. 4797 * 4798 * Return: new csa counter value 4799 */ 4800 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4801 4802 /** 4803 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter 4804 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4805 * @counter: the new value for the counter 4806 * 4807 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be 4808 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 4809 * 4810 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(), 4811 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 4812 */ 4813 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 4814 4815 /** 4816 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 4817 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4818 * 4819 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 4820 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 4821 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 4822 */ 4823 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4824 4825 /** 4826 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1 4827 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4828 * 4829 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero. 4830 */ 4831 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4832 4833 4834 /** 4835 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 4836 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4837 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4838 * 4839 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 4840 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 4841 * 4842 * Can only be called in AP mode. 4843 * 4844 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 4845 */ 4846 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4847 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4848 4849 /** 4850 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 4851 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4852 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4853 * 4854 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 4855 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 4856 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 4857 * 4858 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 4859 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 4860 * 4861 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 4862 */ 4863 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4864 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4865 4866 /** 4867 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 4868 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4869 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4870 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 4871 * if at all possible 4872 * 4873 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 4874 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 4875 * BSSID and address is used. 4876 * 4877 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 4878 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 4879 * 4880 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 4881 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 4882 * 4883 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 4884 */ 4885 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4886 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4887 bool qos_ok); 4888 4889 /** 4890 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 4891 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4892 * @src_addr: source MAC address 4893 * @ssid: SSID buffer 4894 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 4895 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 4896 * 4897 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 4898 * hardware. 4899 * 4900 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 4901 */ 4902 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4903 const u8 *src_addr, 4904 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 4905 size_t tailroom); 4906 4907 /** 4908 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 4909 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4910 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4911 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 4912 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 4913 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 4914 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 4915 * 4916 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 4917 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 4918 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 4919 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 4920 */ 4921 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4922 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 4923 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 4924 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 4925 4926 /** 4927 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 4928 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4929 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4930 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 4931 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 4932 * 4933 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 4934 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 4935 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 4936 * 4937 * Return: The duration. 4938 */ 4939 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4940 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 4941 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 4942 4943 /** 4944 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 4945 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4946 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4947 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 4948 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 4949 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 4950 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 4951 * 4952 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 4953 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 4954 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 4955 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 4956 */ 4957 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4958 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4959 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 4960 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 4961 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 4962 4963 /** 4964 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 4965 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4966 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4967 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 4968 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 4969 * 4970 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 4971 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 4972 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 4973 * 4974 * Return: The duration. 4975 */ 4976 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4977 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4978 size_t frame_len, 4979 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 4980 4981 /** 4982 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 4983 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4984 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4985 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 4986 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 4987 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 4988 * 4989 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 4990 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 4991 * 4992 * Return: The duration. 4993 */ 4994 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4995 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4996 enum nl80211_band band, 4997 size_t frame_len, 4998 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 4999 5000 /** 5001 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5002 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5003 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5004 * 5005 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5006 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5007 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5008 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5009 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5010 * 5011 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5012 * frames are available. 5013 * 5014 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5015 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5016 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5017 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5018 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5019 * use common code for all beacons. 5020 */ 5021 struct sk_buff * 5022 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5023 5024 /** 5025 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5026 * 5027 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5028 * 5029 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5030 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5031 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5032 */ 5033 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5034 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5035 5036 /** 5037 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5038 * 5039 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5040 * from the given packet. 5041 * 5042 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5043 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5044 * with this P1K 5045 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5046 */ 5047 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5048 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5049 { 5050 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5051 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5052 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5053 5054 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5055 } 5056 5057 /** 5058 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5059 * 5060 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5061 * and transmitter address. 5062 * 5063 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5064 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5065 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5066 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5067 */ 5068 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5069 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5070 5071 /** 5072 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5073 * 5074 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5075 * in the packet. 5076 * 5077 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5078 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5079 * encrypted with this key 5080 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5081 */ 5082 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5083 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5084 5085 /** 5086 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5087 * 5088 * @pos: start of crypto header 5089 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5090 * @pn: PN to add 5091 * 5092 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5093 * the packet payload) 5094 * 5095 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5096 * point to the crypto header) 5097 */ 5098 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5099 5100 /** 5101 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5102 * 5103 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5104 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5105 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5106 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5107 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5108 * 5109 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5110 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5111 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5112 * 5113 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5114 * can be done concurrently. 5115 */ 5116 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5117 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5118 5119 /** 5120 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5121 * 5122 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5123 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5124 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5125 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5126 * @seq: new sequence data 5127 * 5128 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5129 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5130 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5131 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5132 * 5133 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5134 * can be done concurrently. 5135 */ 5136 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5137 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5138 5139 /** 5140 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5141 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5142 * 5143 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5144 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5145 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5146 * 5147 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5148 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5149 */ 5150 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5151 5152 /** 5153 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5154 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5155 * @keyconf: new key data 5156 * 5157 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5158 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5159 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5160 * 5161 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5162 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5163 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5164 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5165 * 5166 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5167 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5168 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5169 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5170 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5171 * of the reconfiguration. 5172 * 5173 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5174 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5175 * 5176 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5177 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5178 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5179 * the key that's being replaced. 5180 */ 5181 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5182 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5183 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5184 5185 /** 5186 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5187 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5188 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5189 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5190 * @gfp: allocation flags 5191 */ 5192 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5193 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5194 5195 /** 5196 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5197 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5198 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5199 * 5200 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5201 */ 5202 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5203 5204 /** 5205 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5206 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5207 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5208 * 5209 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5210 */ 5211 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5212 5213 /** 5214 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5215 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5216 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5217 * 5218 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5219 * 5220 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5221 */ 5222 5223 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5224 5225 /** 5226 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5227 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5228 * 5229 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5230 */ 5231 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5232 5233 /** 5234 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5235 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5236 * 5237 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5238 */ 5239 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5240 5241 /** 5242 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5243 * 5244 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5245 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5246 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5247 * any context, including hardirq context. 5248 * 5249 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5250 * @info: information about the completed scan 5251 */ 5252 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5253 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5254 5255 /** 5256 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5257 * 5258 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5259 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5260 * 5261 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5262 */ 5263 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5264 5265 /** 5266 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5267 * 5268 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5269 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5270 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5271 * while associating, for instance. 5272 * 5273 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5274 */ 5275 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5276 5277 /** 5278 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5279 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5280 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5281 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5282 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5283 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5284 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5285 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5286 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5287 */ 5288 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5289 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5290 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5291 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5292 }; 5293 5294 /** 5295 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5296 * 5297 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5298 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5299 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5300 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5301 * 5302 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5303 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5304 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5305 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5306 */ 5307 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5308 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5309 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5310 void *data); 5311 5312 /** 5313 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 5314 * 5315 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5316 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5317 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5318 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 5319 * be used. 5320 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5321 * 5322 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5323 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5324 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5325 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5326 */ 5327 static inline void 5328 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5329 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5330 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5331 void *data) 5332 { 5333 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 5334 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 5335 iterator, data); 5336 } 5337 5338 /** 5339 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 5340 * 5341 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5342 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5343 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5344 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 5345 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5346 * 5347 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5348 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5349 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5350 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5351 */ 5352 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5353 u32 iter_flags, 5354 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5355 u8 *mac, 5356 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5357 void *data); 5358 5359 /** 5360 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces 5361 * 5362 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5363 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5364 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL. 5365 * 5366 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5367 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5368 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5369 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5370 */ 5371 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5372 u32 iter_flags, 5373 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5374 u8 *mac, 5375 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5376 void *data); 5377 5378 /** 5379 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 5380 * 5381 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5382 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5383 * function for them. 5384 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5385 * 5386 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5387 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5388 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5389 */ 5390 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5391 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5392 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5393 void *data); 5394 /** 5395 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5396 * 5397 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 5398 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 5399 * 5400 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5401 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 5402 */ 5403 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 5404 5405 /** 5406 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5407 * 5408 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 5409 * workqueue. 5410 * 5411 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5412 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 5413 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 5414 */ 5415 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5416 struct delayed_work *dwork, 5417 unsigned long delay); 5418 5419 /** 5420 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 5421 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 5422 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5423 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 5424 * 5425 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 5426 * 5427 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5428 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5429 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5430 */ 5431 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 5432 u16 timeout); 5433 5434 /** 5435 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 5436 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5437 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5438 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5439 * 5440 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5441 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 5442 * from any context. 5443 */ 5444 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5445 u16 tid); 5446 5447 /** 5448 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 5449 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 5450 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 5451 * 5452 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 5453 * 5454 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5455 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5456 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5457 */ 5458 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 5459 5460 /** 5461 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 5462 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5463 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5464 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 5465 * 5466 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5467 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 5468 * can be called from any context. 5469 */ 5470 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5471 u16 tid); 5472 5473 /** 5474 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 5475 * 5476 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 5477 * @addr: station's address 5478 * 5479 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5480 * 5481 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5482 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5483 */ 5484 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5485 const u8 *addr); 5486 5487 /** 5488 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 5489 * 5490 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5491 * @addr: remote station's address 5492 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 5493 * 5494 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5495 * 5496 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5497 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5498 * 5499 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 5500 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 5501 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 5502 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 5503 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 5504 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 5505 * is not reliable. 5506 * 5507 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 5508 */ 5509 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5510 const u8 *addr, 5511 const u8 *localaddr); 5512 5513 /** 5514 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 5515 * @hw: the hardware 5516 * @pubsta: the station 5517 * @block: whether to block or unblock 5518 * 5519 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 5520 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 5521 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 5522 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 5523 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 5524 * 5525 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 5526 * manner. 5527 * 5528 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 5529 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 5530 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 5531 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 5532 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 5533 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 5534 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 5535 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 5536 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 5537 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 5538 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 5539 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 5540 * woke up while blocked or not. 5541 */ 5542 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5543 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 5544 5545 /** 5546 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 5547 * @pubsta: the station 5548 * 5549 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 5550 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 5551 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 5552 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 5553 * 5554 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 5555 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 5556 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 5557 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 5558 * 5559 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 5560 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 5561 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 5562 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 5563 */ 5564 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 5565 5566 /** 5567 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 5568 * @pubsta: the station 5569 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 5570 * 5571 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 5572 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 5573 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 5574 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 5575 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 5576 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 5577 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 5578 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 5579 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 5580 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 5581 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 5582 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 5583 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 5584 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 5585 */ 5586 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 5587 5588 /** 5589 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 5590 * 5591 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call 5592 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 5593 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 5594 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 5595 * 5596 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 5597 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 5598 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 5599 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 5600 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 5601 * attempts. 5602 * 5603 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 5604 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 5605 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 5606 * them to 0. 5607 * 5608 * @pubsta: the station 5609 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 5610 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 5611 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 5612 */ 5613 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 5614 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 5615 5616 /** 5617 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 5618 * 5619 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5620 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 5621 * 5622 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 5623 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 5624 */ 5625 bool 5626 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 5627 5628 /** 5629 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 5630 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5631 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5632 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5633 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5634 * 5635 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5636 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5637 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 5638 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 5639 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 5640 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 5641 * 5642 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 5643 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 5644 * set_key callback. 5645 */ 5646 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5647 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5648 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5649 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5650 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5651 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5652 void *data), 5653 void *iter_data); 5654 5655 /** 5656 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 5657 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5658 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5659 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5660 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5661 * 5662 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5663 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5664 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 5665 * in removal process will be skipped. 5666 * 5667 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 5668 * and thus iter must be atomic. 5669 */ 5670 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5671 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5672 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5673 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5674 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5675 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5676 void *data), 5677 void *iter_data); 5678 5679 /** 5680 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 5681 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5682 * @iter: iterator function 5683 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 5684 * 5685 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 5686 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 5687 * places while calling into the driver. 5688 * 5689 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 5690 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 5691 * removed. 5692 * 5693 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 5694 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 5695 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 5696 * or not. 5697 */ 5698 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 5699 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5700 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5701 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 5702 void *data), 5703 void *iter_data); 5704 5705 /** 5706 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5707 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5708 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5709 * 5710 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5711 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 5712 * information. This function must only be called from within the 5713 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 5714 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 5715 * %NULL. 5716 * 5717 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5718 */ 5719 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5720 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5721 5722 /** 5723 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 5724 * 5725 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5726 * 5727 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 5728 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 5729 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 5730 */ 5731 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5732 5733 /** 5734 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 5735 * 5736 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5737 * 5738 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 5739 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 5740 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 5741 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 5742 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 5743 * 5744 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 5745 * without connection recovery attempts. 5746 */ 5747 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5748 5749 /** 5750 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 5751 * 5752 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5753 * 5754 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 5755 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 5756 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 5757 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 5758 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 5759 * 5760 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 5761 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 5762 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 5763 * disconnect normally later. 5764 * 5765 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 5766 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 5767 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 5768 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 5769 */ 5770 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5771 5772 /** 5773 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 5774 * rssi threshold triggered 5775 * 5776 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5777 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 5778 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 5779 * @gfp: context flags 5780 * 5781 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 5782 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 5783 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 5784 */ 5785 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5786 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 5787 s32 rssi_level, 5788 gfp_t gfp); 5789 5790 /** 5791 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 5792 * 5793 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5794 * @gfp: context flags 5795 */ 5796 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 5797 5798 /** 5799 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 5800 * 5801 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5802 */ 5803 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5804 5805 /** 5806 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 5807 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5808 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 5809 * 5810 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 5811 * and wake up the suspended queues. 5812 */ 5813 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success); 5814 5815 /** 5816 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 5817 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5818 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 5819 * 5820 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 5821 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 5822 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 5823 */ 5824 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5825 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 5826 5827 /** 5828 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 5829 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5830 */ 5831 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5832 5833 /** 5834 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 5835 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5836 */ 5837 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5838 5839 /** 5840 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 5841 * 5842 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 5843 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 5844 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 5845 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 5846 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 5847 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 5848 * 5849 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5850 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 5851 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 5852 */ 5853 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 5854 const u8 *addr); 5855 5856 /** 5857 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 5858 * @pubsta: station struct 5859 * @tid: the session's TID 5860 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 5861 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 5862 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 5863 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 5864 * 5865 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 5866 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 5867 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 5868 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 5869 */ 5870 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 5871 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 5872 u16 received_mpdus); 5873 5874 /** 5875 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 5876 * 5877 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 5878 * buffer. 5879 * 5880 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5881 * @ra: the peer's destination address 5882 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 5883 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 5884 */ 5885 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 5886 5887 /** 5888 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 5889 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5890 * @addr: station mac address 5891 * @tid: the rx tid 5892 */ 5893 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 5894 unsigned int tid); 5895 5896 /** 5897 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 5898 * 5899 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 5900 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 5901 * reordering. 5902 * 5903 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 5904 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 5905 * 5906 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5907 * @addr: station mac address 5908 * @tid: the rx tid 5909 */ 5910 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5911 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 5912 { 5913 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 5914 return; 5915 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 5916 } 5917 5918 /** 5919 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 5920 * 5921 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 5922 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 5923 * reordering. 5924 * 5925 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 5926 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 5927 * 5928 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5929 * @addr: station mac address 5930 * @tid: the rx tid 5931 */ 5932 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5933 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 5934 { 5935 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 5936 return; 5937 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 5938 } 5939 5940 /** 5941 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 5942 * 5943 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 5944 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 5945 * 5946 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 5947 * 5948 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5949 * @addr: station mac address 5950 * @tid: the rx tid 5951 */ 5952 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5953 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 5954 5955 /* Rate control API */ 5956 5957 /** 5958 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 5959 * 5960 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 5961 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 5962 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 5963 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 5964 * to be filled in 5965 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 5966 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 5967 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 5968 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 5969 * RTS threshold 5970 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 5971 * if the selected rate supports it 5972 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 5973 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 5974 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 5975 */ 5976 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 5977 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 5978 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 5979 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 5980 struct sk_buff *skb; 5981 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 5982 bool rts, short_preamble; 5983 u32 rate_idx_mask; 5984 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 5985 bool bss; 5986 }; 5987 5988 /** 5989 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 5990 */ 5991 enum rate_control_capabilities { 5992 /** 5993 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 5994 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 5995 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 5996 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 5997 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 5998 */ 5999 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6000 }; 6001 6002 struct rate_control_ops { 6003 unsigned long capa; 6004 const char *name; 6005 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6006 void (*free)(void *priv); 6007 6008 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6009 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6010 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6011 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6012 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6013 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6014 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6015 u32 changed); 6016 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6017 void *priv_sta); 6018 6019 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6020 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6021 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6022 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6023 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6024 struct sk_buff *skb); 6025 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6026 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6027 6028 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6029 struct dentry *dir); 6030 6031 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6032 }; 6033 6034 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6035 enum nl80211_band band, 6036 int index) 6037 { 6038 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6039 } 6040 6041 static inline s8 6042 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6043 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6044 { 6045 int i; 6046 6047 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6048 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6049 return i; 6050 6051 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6052 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6053 6054 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6055 return 0; 6056 } 6057 6058 static inline 6059 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6060 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6061 { 6062 unsigned int i; 6063 6064 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6065 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6066 return true; 6067 return false; 6068 } 6069 6070 /** 6071 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6072 * 6073 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6074 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6075 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6076 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6077 * 6078 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6079 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6080 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6081 */ 6082 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6083 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6084 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6085 6086 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6087 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6088 6089 static inline bool 6090 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6091 { 6092 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6093 } 6094 6095 static inline bool 6096 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6097 { 6098 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6099 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6100 } 6101 6102 static inline bool 6103 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6104 { 6105 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6106 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6107 } 6108 6109 static inline bool 6110 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6111 { 6112 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6113 } 6114 6115 static inline bool 6116 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6117 { 6118 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6119 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6120 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6121 } 6122 6123 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6124 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6125 { 6126 if (p2p) { 6127 switch (type) { 6128 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6129 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6130 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6131 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6132 default: 6133 break; 6134 } 6135 } 6136 return type; 6137 } 6138 6139 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6140 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6141 { 6142 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6143 } 6144 6145 /** 6146 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6147 * 6148 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6149 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6150 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6151 * 6152 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6153 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6154 * matching GroupId management frame. 6155 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6156 */ 6157 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6158 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6159 6160 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6161 int rssi_min_thold, 6162 int rssi_max_thold); 6163 6164 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6165 6166 /** 6167 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6168 * 6169 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6170 * 6171 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6172 * 6173 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6174 * applicable. 6175 */ 6176 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6177 6178 /** 6179 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 6180 * @vif: virtual interface 6181 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 6182 * @gfp: allocation flags 6183 * 6184 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 6185 */ 6186 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6187 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 6188 gfp_t gfp); 6189 6190 /** 6191 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 6192 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6193 * @vif: virtual interface 6194 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 6195 * @band: the band to transmit on 6196 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 6197 * 6198 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 6199 */ 6200 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6201 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 6202 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 6203 6204 /** 6205 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 6206 * 6207 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 6208 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 6209 * 6210 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 6211 * 6212 * private: 6213 * 6214 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 6215 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 6216 */ 6217 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 6218 u32 next_tsf; 6219 bool has_next_tsf; 6220 6221 u8 absent; 6222 6223 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6224 struct { 6225 u32 start; 6226 u32 duration; 6227 u32 interval; 6228 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6229 }; 6230 6231 /** 6232 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 6233 * 6234 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 6235 * @data: NoA tracking data 6236 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6237 * 6238 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 6239 */ 6240 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 6241 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6242 6243 /** 6244 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 6245 * 6246 * @data: NoA tracking data 6247 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6248 */ 6249 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6250 6251 /** 6252 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 6253 * @vif: virtual interface 6254 * @peer: the peer's destination address 6255 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 6256 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 6257 * @gfp: allocation flags 6258 * 6259 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 6260 */ 6261 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 6262 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 6263 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 6264 6265 /** 6266 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 6267 * 6268 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 6269 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 6270 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 6271 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 6272 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 6273 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 6274 * 6275 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 6276 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 6277 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6278 * 6279 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 6280 * @tid: the TID to reserve 6281 * 6282 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 6283 */ 6284 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6285 6286 /** 6287 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 6288 * 6289 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 6290 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 6291 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 6292 * 6293 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 6294 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 6295 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6296 * 6297 * @sta: the station 6298 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 6299 */ 6300 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6301 6302 /** 6303 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6304 * 6305 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6306 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6307 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6308 * 6309 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 6310 * 6311 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 6312 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 6313 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the 6314 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 6315 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 6316 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 6317 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 6318 * 6319 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 6320 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 6321 */ 6322 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6323 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6324 6325 /** 6326 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6327 * (in process context) 6328 * 6329 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 6330 * (internally disables bottom halves). 6331 * 6332 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6333 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6334 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6335 */ 6336 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6337 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6338 { 6339 struct sk_buff *skb; 6340 6341 local_bh_disable(); 6342 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 6343 local_bh_enable(); 6344 6345 return skb; 6346 } 6347 6348 /** 6349 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 6350 * 6351 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6352 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 6353 * 6354 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 6355 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 6356 * driver has finished scheduling it. 6357 */ 6358 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6359 6360 /** 6361 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 6362 * 6363 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6364 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 6365 * 6366 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 6367 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 6368 */ 6369 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6370 6371 /* (deprecated) */ 6372 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 6373 { 6374 } 6375 6376 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6377 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 6378 6379 /** 6380 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 6381 * 6382 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6383 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6384 * 6385 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 6386 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 6387 * 6388 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 6389 * this TXQ internally. 6390 */ 6391 static inline void 6392 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6393 { 6394 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 6395 } 6396 6397 /** 6398 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 6399 * 6400 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6401 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6402 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 6403 * 6404 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 6405 * internally. 6406 */ 6407 static inline void 6408 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6409 bool force) 6410 { 6411 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 6412 } 6413 6414 /** 6415 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 6416 * 6417 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 6418 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 6419 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by 6420 * next_txq(). 6421 * 6422 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 6423 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 6424 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 6425 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 6426 * again. 6427 * 6428 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 6429 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 6430 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 6431 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 6432 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 6433 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 6434 * 6435 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6436 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6437 */ 6438 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6439 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6440 6441 /** 6442 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 6443 * 6444 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 6445 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 6446 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 6447 * 6448 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6449 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 6450 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 6451 */ 6452 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6453 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 6454 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 6455 6456 /** 6457 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 6458 * 6459 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 6460 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6461 * 6462 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6463 * @inst_id: the local instance id 6464 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 6465 * @gfp: allocation flags 6466 */ 6467 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6468 u8 inst_id, 6469 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 6470 gfp_t gfp); 6471 6472 /** 6473 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 6474 * 6475 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 6476 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 6477 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6478 * 6479 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6480 * @match: match event information 6481 * @gfp: allocation flags 6482 */ 6483 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6484 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 6485 gfp_t gfp); 6486 6487 /** 6488 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 6489 * 6490 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6491 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 6492 * 6493 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6494 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 6495 * information. 6496 * @len: frame length in bytes 6497 */ 6498 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6499 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 6500 int len); 6501 6502 /** 6503 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 6504 * 6505 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6506 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 6507 * 6508 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6509 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6510 * @len: frame length in bytes 6511 */ 6512 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6513 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 6514 int len); 6515 /** 6516 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 6517 * 6518 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 6519 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 6520 * hardware or firmware. 6521 * 6522 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6523 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 6524 */ 6525 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 6526 6527 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 6528